Return to Site | View Calendar | Mobile Version
-- Select Location -- Collamer Park Eastline Romp and Play Dog Park Garden Patio Malta Community Center Malta Community Center - Gym Malta Community Center - Gym, Side 1 Malta Community Center - Gym, Side 2 Malta Community Center Parking Lot Malta Nature Preserve Round Lake Nature Preserve
to   
Show Location

Friday October 10, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
11:00 AM - 1:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Friday Intermediate Session 1 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 3:00 PM	Pickleball - Advanced Practice pickleball 4-week series Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 5:30 PM	12-17 open gym with waiver
6:00 PM - 7:45 PM	Adult Pick-Up Basketball - Adult Pick-Up Basketball Join in the fun and get some exercise.  Drop in and join in a pick-up basketball game.  Program is open to anyone 18 or older looking to join in a game. Picture ID required to verify age and residency. No pre-registration required.

Tuesday October 14, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold Toning (Tuesdays) Session1 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
12:00 PM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball 101 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:45 PM - 3:15 PM	Pickleball - Strategy Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock your Fitness
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Night Classes Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Wednesday October 15, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Wednesday Session 1 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Novice Pickleball Mini Program Wednesday Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 2:30 PM	18+ Open Gym
2:30 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program- Nights Wed Beginners Session l Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Thursday October 16, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold (Thursdays) Session 1 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
11:45 AM - 12:45 PM	Free Fitness Classes by MVP - Power and Balance Total Body Circuits Free Fitness Classes Power & Balance Total Body Circuits Instructor: Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness InstructorJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! Move through timed exercises set up in six different circuit stations, incorporating low-impact aerobics, resistance training, core, and balance exercises to enhance strength, coordination, and endurance for a total body workout. Intensity:  Moderate to high, modifications are offered for all levels. This is an eleven-week in-person program that meets on Thursdays. All are welcome regardless of membership with MVP Health Care insurance.18+ yrs.Thursdays| 11:45-12:30   September 11 - November 20 Free Fitness ClassInstructor:  Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness Instructor MVP Strength & Striders at Malta Community Center GymJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! You will gain strength, coordination and improve your balance as you move through this circuit training class that incorporates weights, balance exercises and low impact cardio as you walk the perimeter of the gym at your own pace. More than just a workout, it’s a chance to connect with others in a friendly, supportive group. This program is designed for all fitness levels with modifications offered.  All are welcome to join and membership to MVP Health Care is not required.
1:30 PM - 3:30 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Thurs Beg/Int Session 1 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:45 PM - 8:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Friday October 17, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
11:00 AM - 1:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Friday Intermediate Session 1 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 3:00 PM	Pickleball - Advanced Practice pickleball 4-week series Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 5:30 PM	12-17 open gym with waiver
6:00 PM - 7:45 PM	Adult Pick-Up Basketball - Adult Pick-Up Basketball Join in the fun and get some exercise.  Drop in and join in a pick-up basketball game.  Program is open to anyone 18 or older looking to join in a game. Picture ID required to verify age and residency. No pre-registration required.

Saturday October 18, 2025
8:00 AM - 8:45 AM	Rock your Fitness
8:00 AM - 8:45 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Saturday Morning Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 12:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Monday October 20, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Monday Session 1 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Mondays Beginners Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
2:00 PM - 4:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Beginners Monday Afternoon Session I Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Tuesday October 21, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold Toning (Tuesdays) Session1 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock your Fitness
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Night Classes Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Wednesday October 22, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Wednesday Session 1 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Novice Pickleball Mini Program Wednesday Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 2:30 PM	18+ Open Gym
2:30 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym

Thursday October 23, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold (Thursdays) Session 1 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
11:45 AM - 12:45 PM	Free Fitness Classes by MVP - Power and Balance Total Body Circuits Free Fitness Classes Power & Balance Total Body Circuits Instructor: Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness InstructorJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! Move through timed exercises set up in six different circuit stations, incorporating low-impact aerobics, resistance training, core, and balance exercises to enhance strength, coordination, and endurance for a total body workout. Intensity:  Moderate to high, modifications are offered for all levels. This is an eleven-week in-person program that meets on Thursdays. All are welcome regardless of membership with MVP Health Care insurance.18+ yrs.Thursdays| 11:45-12:30   September 11 - November 20 Free Fitness ClassInstructor:  Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness Instructor MVP Strength & Striders at Malta Community Center GymJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! You will gain strength, coordination and improve your balance as you move through this circuit training class that incorporates weights, balance exercises and low impact cardio as you walk the perimeter of the gym at your own pace. More than just a workout, it’s a chance to connect with others in a friendly, supportive group. This program is designed for all fitness levels with modifications offered.  All are welcome to join and membership to MVP Health Care is not required.
3:45 PM - 8:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Friday October 24, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
1:30 PM - 3:00 PM	Pickleball - Advanced Practice pickleball 4-week series Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 5:30 PM	12-17 open gym with waiver
6:00 PM - 7:45 PM	Adult Pick-Up Basketball - Adult Pick-Up Basketball Join in the fun and get some exercise.  Drop in and join in a pick-up basketball game.  Program is open to anyone 18 or older looking to join in a game. Picture ID required to verify age and residency. No pre-registration required.

Saturday October 25, 2025
8:00 AM - 8:45 AM	Rock your Fitness
8:00 AM - 8:45 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Saturday Morning Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 12:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Sunday October 26, 2025
12:00 PM - 4:00 PM	Trunk or Treat Fundraiser

Monday October 27, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Mondays Beginners Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Tuesday October 28, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
12:00 PM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Serving Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:45 PM - 3:15 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball 102 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock your Fitness
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Night Classes Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Wednesday October 29, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Novice Pickleball Mini Program Wednesday Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 2:30 PM	18+ Open Gym
2:30 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program- Nights Wed Beginners Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Thursday October 30, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
11:45 AM - 12:45 PM	Free Fitness Classes by MVP - Power and Balance Total Body Circuits Free Fitness Classes Power & Balance Total Body Circuits Instructor: Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness InstructorJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! Move through timed exercises set up in six different circuit stations, incorporating low-impact aerobics, resistance training, core, and balance exercises to enhance strength, coordination, and endurance for a total body workout. Intensity:  Moderate to high, modifications are offered for all levels. This is an eleven-week in-person program that meets on Thursdays. All are welcome regardless of membership with MVP Health Care insurance.18+ yrs.Thursdays| 11:45-12:30   September 11 - November 20 Free Fitness ClassInstructor:  Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness Instructor MVP Strength & Striders at Malta Community Center GymJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! You will gain strength, coordination and improve your balance as you move through this circuit training class that incorporates weights, balance exercises and low impact cardio as you walk the perimeter of the gym at your own pace. More than just a workout, it’s a chance to connect with others in a friendly, supportive group. This program is designed for all fitness levels with modifications offered.  All are welcome to join and membership to MVP Health Care is not required.
1:30 PM - 3:30 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Thurs Beg/Int Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:45 PM - 8:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Friday October 31, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock your Fitness
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
11:00 AM - 1:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Friday Intermediate Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
1:30 PM - 3:00 PM	Pickleball - Advanced Practice pickleball 4-week series Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 5:30 PM	12-17 open gym with waiver
6:00 PM - 7:45 PM	Adult Pick-Up Basketball - Adult Pick-Up Basketball Join in the fun and get some exercise.  Drop in and join in a pick-up basketball game.  Program is open to anyone 18 or older looking to join in a game. Picture ID required to verify age and residency. No pre-registration required.

Saturday November 1, 2025
8:00 AM - 8:45 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Saturday Morning Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 12:00 PM	Family Open Gym

Monday November 3, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Monday Session 2 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Mondays Beginners Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
2:00 PM - 4:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Beginners Monday Afternoon Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
4:00 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Tuesday November 4, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold Toning (Tuesdays) Session 2 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
5:30 PM - 6:15 PM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Night Classes Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 PM - 8:30 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Wednesday November 5, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Wednesday Session 2 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
1:30 PM - 2:30 PM	18+ Open Gym
2:30 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program- Nights Wed Beginners Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)

Thursday November 6, 2025
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Golden Walking Club - Golden Walking Club FreeJoin us for a friendly and supportive walking group designed especially for seniors who want to stay active and connect with others. If you wish to improve your health, make new friends, or enjoy a pleasant stroll, this group is the perfect place to start.Come for the steps, stay for the smiles.As an added treat, we will host a monthly coffee hour where you can sit down, share stories, and enjoy good conversation over a warm cup of coffee.  Coffee hour will be held on 10/21,11/18,12/16.1/27,2/24,3/24,4/21Sign in at the Front Desk
10:30 AM - 11:30 AM	Zumba® - Zumba® Gold (Thursdays) Session 2 ZUMBA® Perfect For Everybody and every body! Each Zumba® class is designed to bring people together to sweat it on.How It WorksWe take the "work" out of workout, by mixing low-intensity and high-intensity moves for an interval-style, calorie-burning, dance fitness party. Once the Latin and World rhythms take over, you'll see why Zumba® Fitness classes are often called exercise in disguise. Super effective? Check. Super fun? Check and check.BenefitsA total workout, combining all elements of fitness – cardio, muscle conditioning, balance and flexibility, mobility, boosted energy and a serious dose of awesome each time you leave class.Zumba Dance Fitness with Cathy KopaAn hour of Zumba dance fitness will transport you as you move to music from around the world along with a few songs you know with easy to follow moves, interval training principles working all muscle groups.  The result is an hour of fun and fitness with sweat and smiles guaranteed. And we end every class with a Circl Mobility cool down combining elements of breath work, mobility and flexibility you will leave feeling refreshed, restored, energized and renewed. All levels welcome, no experience needed, modifications shown. Cathy Kopa is a fun high energy licensed Zumba and Circl Mobility instructor with more than 10 years experience teaching Zumba Fitness classes.Zumba Gold with Bernadette Knight Zumba Gold is for the Active older adult who are looking for a modified Zumba® class that recreates the original moves you love at a lower-intensity. The design of the class introduces easy-to-follow Zumba® choreography that focuses on balance, range of motion and coordination. Come ready to sweat, and prepare to leave empowered and feeling strong. The Benefits of the class focuses on all the elements of fitness: cardiovascular, muscular conditioning, flexibility and balance!  This class is taught by Bernadette Knight who is a experienced instructor who makes the class fun and a great place to meet new friends.
11:45 AM - 12:45 PM	Free Fitness Classes by MVP - Power and Balance Total Body Circuits Free Fitness Classes Power & Balance Total Body Circuits Instructor: Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness InstructorJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! Move through timed exercises set up in six different circuit stations, incorporating low-impact aerobics, resistance training, core, and balance exercises to enhance strength, coordination, and endurance for a total body workout. Intensity:  Moderate to high, modifications are offered for all levels. This is an eleven-week in-person program that meets on Thursdays. All are welcome regardless of membership with MVP Health Care insurance.18+ yrs.Thursdays| 11:45-12:30   September 11 - November 20 Free Fitness ClassInstructor:  Staci Penna, Certified Group Fitness Instructor MVP Strength & Striders at Malta Community Center GymJoin us for this free lunchtime class sponsored by MVP Health Care! You will gain strength, coordination and improve your balance as you move through this circuit training class that incorporates weights, balance exercises and low impact cardio as you walk the perimeter of the gym at your own pace. More than just a workout, it’s a chance to connect with others in a friendly, supportive group. This program is designed for all fitness levels with modifications offered.  All are welcome to join and membership to MVP Health Care is not required.
1:30 PM - 3:30 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Thurs Beg/Int Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 5:30 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Saratoga Volleyball Club

Friday November 7, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Stroller Strides Series by Fit4 Mom - Stroller Striders Holiday Hustle Fit4Mom Sampler Series Instructor:  Christine BoydStroller Strides Instructor:  Christine BoydChristine was a college volleyball player and special education teacher and always loved sports and fitness growing up. After the birth of her second son, Christine was looking for opportunities to meet other moms and friends.  She took a Fit4 Mom class and loved it so much she became co-owner of the franchise.  She holds her certifications in Stroller Strides and Prenatal & Postnatal Fitness. Fit4Mom Sampler Series at Shenantaha Creek Park and Malta Community Center (see schedule below)Are you looking for a way to workout but have little kids in tow? We've got you covered! Fit4Mom offers classes for all ages and stages, from new moms to grandmothers and everything in between! We offer multiple class formats and this series will let you try them all so you can figure out what's right for you! We'll showcase each format in class for two weeks at a time. Moms can come with or without kids for all of the classes! We're so excited for you to see what our village is all about!Stroller Strides® is a total-body workout with strength, cardio, and core training, all while engaging the little ones in a stroller! Stroller Barre® is a stroller workout that improves your posture, stability, and mobility while strengthening your body from the inside out! Reconnect with your body, increase flexibility, and find the inner strength you need for motherhood. Strides 360™ is a heart-pumping interval training stroller workout that increases your endurance while developing speed, agility & quickness. Body Boost® is offered as a mom-centered workout that is challenging, empowering, and energizing. By combining cardio, strength, core training, and meditation, you will leave this workout refreshed and recharged for all that comes with motherhood.
11:00 AM - 1:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Friday Intermediate Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
3:30 PM - 8:00 PM	Harvest Craft Fair Set up

Saturday November 8, 2025
9:00 AM - 7:00 PM	Harvest Craft Fair

Monday November 10, 2025
5:30 AM - 6:15 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
6:30 AM - 7:30 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM	Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp - Bootcamp Instructor:  Becky Weyrauch AKA: Coach Becky is a certified fitness professional for over 20 years. Her certification & specialty training include AFAA Personal Trainer & Group Exercise, MAD Dog Athletics Spin Instructor, Specialty Training in: Kettle Bell level 1 coach, TRX, Youth Fitness, Bootcamp Fitness, Senior Fitness & Nutrition Coaching.  She is passionate about helping her clients of all ages from our littlest in our community in the Tiny Movers program to adults of all ages and fitness levels in the Rock Your Fitness Bootcamp program to  achieve their fitness & nutrition goals.  She truly helps her clients by giving them encouraging support and accountability to get them there. She works with her clients every step of the fitness journey! Rebecca has a saying, "We all have to workout, so let's have some fitness fun while doing so”! Come join in the FUN! Register NOW! Boot CampThis 45-60-minute class is great for any fitness level which will include high intensity intervals mixed with body weight exercises, high rep, endurance, and strength training intervals.  Class will be held inside and outside when weather permits.Bring Water, Yoga Mat,TowelTo Register Contact Becky at 518-522-9765(If you need above equipment let Becky know at time of registration)If weather permits classes will be held outside and insideEach workout is different preventing boredom and to keep our bodies guessing resulting in the best result!Modifications Always offeredAdvanced options always offered If you need equipment please text or call Rebecca Weyrauch directly at 518.522.9765 to see what equipment Rock Your Fitness can provide.  M/W/FTime: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Tuesday Night  5:30-6:15pmSaturday AM  8-8:45am Class held at Malta Community Center, 1 Bayberry DriveTo register text or call Becky at 518-522-9765She will return your message within 24 hours to complete the registration process.  Mon•Wed•Fri Times Offered: We offer 3 different times slots. When you register choose the time slot that works best for your schedule.Times: 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 12 workouts/$154 8 workouts /$136* *at the time of registration, must choose days, dates and times preferred for this option. This is for class planning purposes. September 9/3-9/29M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 14 workouts/$19610 workouts/$170Tuesday EveningsDates: 9/2, 9/9, 9/16, 9/23, 9/30 5 workouts/$85Saturday Mornings 9/6, 9/13, 9/20, 9/27 4 workouts/$68October 10/6-10/31M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M 10/7,10/21,10/28 Dates:  10/7, 10/21, 10/283 workouts /$50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates:10/4, 10/18, 10/253 workouts /$50 November 11/3-11/26M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. 11/4, 11/18, 11/25 3 workouts: $50Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.  Dates:11/1, 11/8, 11/15, 11/224 workouts /$68  DecemberDates: Mon.12/1-Wed.12/24M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$1548 workouts/$136Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 12/2, 12/9, 12/16, 12/234 workouts /$68Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 12/6, 12/13, 12/203 workouts/$50 Dates: •Mon. Jan.5- Fri. Jan. 30th M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. 11 workouts /$154 8 workouts/$136 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: •1/6, 1/13, 1/20, 1/27 4 workouts /$68   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: •1/3, 1/10, 1/17, 1/24, 1/31 5 workouts /$85 February  Dates: Mon. Feb. 2- Fri. Feb. 27   please note we will be closed on the following dates:  Mon. 2/16, Tues.2/17, Wed. 2/18, Fri.2/20,  Sat. 2/21   Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 9 workouts/$126 6 workouts/$100 Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 2/3, 2/10, 2/24 please note we will be closed 2/17 Price: 3 workouts /$50   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 2/7, 2/14, 2/28 please note we will be closed 2/21 Price: 3 workouts/$50 MARCH Dates: Mon. March 2- Fri. April 3 Days: M/W/F •5:30-6:15A.M. •6:30-7:30A.M. •9:00-10:00A.M. Price: 15 workouts /$210 10 workouts/$170   Tuesday Evenings  5:30-6:15P.M. Dates: 3/3, 3/7, 3/10, 3/21, 3/31 Price: 5 workouts /$85   Saturday Mornings  8:00-8:45A.M. Dates: 3/7, 3/14, 3/28 Price: 3 workouts /$50APRIL2026Dates:Mon. April 13-Fri. May 1Please note we will be closed on the following dates :Sat. 4/4, Mom. 4/6, Tues. 4/7, Wed.4/8, Fri.4/10, Days:M/W/F 5:30-6:15A.M. 6:30-7:30A.M. 9:00-10:00A.M. Price:9 workouts /$1266 workouts /$100 Tuesday Evenings 5:30-6:15P.M.Dates:4/14, 4/21, 4/28Price:3 workouts/$50 Saturday Mornings 8:00-8:45A.M.Dates:4/11, 4/18, 4/25Price:3 workouts /$50
10:15 AM - 11:00 AM	Tiny Movers - Tiny Movers Monday Session 2 Tiny MoversInstructor:  Becky Weyrauch of Rock your FitnessTiny Movers is a fitness class for young kids. Coach Becky will teach your kids the skills of listening and motor skills coordination while playing age appropriate games that get your kids moving. In this non-competitive, positive environment the emphasis will be good sportsmanship, perseverance and how to be part of a team. These will become the building blocks for school age sports and the lifelong passion for healthy living.*Parent must stay for the program and will be asked to participate at certain times during class.Children should wear sneakers and bring a water bottle.
11:30 AM - 1:30 PM	Pickleball - Mondays Beginners Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
2:00 PM - 4:00 PM	Pickleball - Pickleball Program Beginners Monday Afternoon Session 2 Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)
4:00 PM - 5:55 PM	Family Open Gym
6:00 PM - 8:00 PM	Pickleball - Night Drop-In Pickleball Pickleball Programs- Indoors at Malta Community CenterPickleball programs are a great way to get active, meet new friends and enjoy a quick, fast-paced competitive game.  It is great for all ages and experience levels. See level description   Pickleball programs will have 28 players on three courts.  Courts are open for two hours where you can play with others of like ability.No Instructor:  Not sure what your skill level is?  See the descriptions below.  Must Pre register for entire program   Provide your own paddles.How the Program WorksAll games played will be doubles gamesThere is no assignment to a court based on skill level (see guidelines for player’s skill level below)If courts are occupied, how the next players will proceed will be determined based on the level of play and group size at the time of play.  Games are played to 11-9 pointsBeginners Drop-In Pickleball   Monday Day 11:30AM-1:30PM Pickleball players which have experience playing at the Beginner’s level can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor Intermediate Drop-In Pickleball Monday Nights 6-8 PMPickleball players which play at the Intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructorRegistration will be taken at the front desk on the day of play.Exact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.Beginners/Intermediate Tuesday Night Drop-In PickleballPickleball players which play at the beginners/intermediate level (see level description below) can drop in for two hours of open play.  The program will be limited to 28 players with 3 courts available.  No instructor  Registration taken at the front desk on the day of play.Tuesdays 6:30-8:30pmExact Change in Cash is Appreciated. Proof required for residency discount.SEE BELOW FOR PRICE, DATES AND TIMES Skill Levels Definitions based on the USAPABeginnersMinimum Skills NeededThis player is just starting to play pickleball and has some experience playing—minimal understanding of rules of the game.Beginners/IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed:USAPA 2.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINITIONThis player has limited experience. Can sustain a short rally with players of equal ability. Basic ability to keep score.IntermediateMinimum Skills Needed: USAPA 3.5 PLAYER SKILL RATING DEFINTIONFOREHAND: Improved stroke development with moderate level of shot control. BACKHAND: Learning stroke form and starting to develop consistency but will avoid if possible. SERVE / RETURN: Consistently gets serve/return in play with limited ability to control depth. DINK: Increased consistency, with limited ability to control height/depth. Sustains medium length rallies. Starting to understand variations of pace. 3RD SHOT: Developing the drop shot in a way to get to the net. VOLLEY: Is able to volley medium paced shots thereby developing control. STRATEGY: Moves quickly towards the non-volley zone (NVZ) when opportunity is there. Acknowledges difference between hard game and soft game and is starting to vary own game during recreation and tournament play. Can sustain short rallies. Is learning proper court positioning. Basic knowledge of stacking and understands situations where it can be effective.Pickleball Instructors Ed Koivula has been playing competitive tennis since 1990 and playing pickleball for seven years.  He is a Level 1 certified pickleball instructor by Pickleball Coaching International.  He is a 4.5 player that has medaled in tournaments at the local, state and international level. Ed enjoys working with players to improve fundamentals and use them to execute tactics and strategies.  Ed taught tennis as a United States Professional Tennis Registry certified tennis instructor and is currently a NYS certified public High School coach.Mary Knepper (Mary Pat) started playing Pickleball in 2019.  She realized an immediate love and passion for the sport, and soon after obtained an IPTPA (International Pickleball Teaching Professional Association) Level 1 Pickleball Instructor certification.  Her enthusiasm for the sport, along with recognizing students' wants, needs, and abilities is key to helping students advance their Pickleball game. Speciality Pickleball ClinicsClinics are 90 minutes long, 60 minutes of instruction followed by 30 minutes of play utilizing the skills you learned unless other wise described.Beginners Skills and Drills:Did you know that the very best way to improve your Pickleball game is repetition? This class is for the Beginners who have some experience playing. Students should be familiar with good fundamental strokes and full knowledge of the rules of game play who are looking to practice their skills to improve their game through a series of 3 skills and drills sessions. In each lesson, we will focus on specific skills, explore techniques and strategy while building muscle memory through drills and repetition. We will work on skills including serving, serve return, the third shot, dinking, and court strategy.  Pickleball 101Learn the fastest growing sport in North America. This class will give you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. You’ll learn the basic game overview, how to keep score, basic footwork and stroke mechanics, serving, and returning.(Beginners with no experience) Pickleball 102This class will take Pickleball 101 one more step. Participants will continue to work on their 101 skills. In addition, you will learn basic court skill;  shot placement, moving with your doubles partner, and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line.Prerequisite: Pickleball 101The Third Shot Learn one of the most important shots in pickleball to help the serving  team get to the net and win more points. This class will give you the skills to execute a third shot drive, lob or drop shot. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experienceDinking  You served, they returned service, and your third shot brought you and your partner up to the NVZ. You’ve neutralized play and the dink rally begins. This class will teach you dinking footwork, dinking control, strokes and strategies.  Prerequisite: Pickleball 101, 102, or already play and fully understand the game  The First 4 Shots  When you hit a short serve, you’re giving a big advantage to your opponent by helping them get to the NVZ in a jiffy. When you send back a short return of serve you’re also giving a big advantage to your opponent by inviting them to the NVZ. Learn how to strategically use the first four shots in pickleball to your advantage and win more points. Prerequisite: Six months of playing experience.  DINKING & THE THIRD SHOT DROP Skills and PlayThis class is for experienced players with good fundamentals and full knowledge of the game. The focus will be on improving the third shot drop and dinking skills. Participants will review the techniques of this skill, repeat and practice the skill to improve muscle memory and incorporate the skill into game play. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102, already play and fully understand the game, and be able to keep up a steady rally.Learn to Play Pickleball 4-week seriesLearn the fastest growing sport in North America. This 4-week clinic will teach you the skills necessary to get started playing doubles Pickleball. Paddletek paddles and balls are available to borrow. (Beginners with no experience)Week one you will learn the basic game overview, basic footwork, stroke mechanics, serving, and returning. Week two you expand your skills and learn basic court skills, shot placement, moving with your doubles partner and when to move up to the NVZ (no volley zone) or kitchen line when you’re the receiving team. Week three you will learn strategies on how to move up to the kitchen line when you are the serving team. Week four put what you have learned into action through structured play with other class participants and the instructor.KEEP THEM BACK! Improve your forehand, backhand, punch volley and blocking shot at the net. This class is for experienced players with full knowledge of the rules of game play. The focus will be on improving the return of service by improving your stroke mechanics for your forehand and backhand.  You’ll also learn the blocking shot at the net to keep your opponent’s back. Prerequisite: Pickleball 101 and 102 or already play and fully understand the game Pickleball Strategy & Court Coverage This clinic is for experienced players looking to take a new step. We will concentrate on the mental part of the game. Mental toughness and patience are essential skills on the pickleball court. Players will learn how to move with their partner to cover the court, improve anticipation, eliminate, create and use angles, construct points, identify and exploit opponent weaknesses, how to stay mentally tough and reset after each point.DRILLS, SKILLS AND PLAY Novice Pickleball Mini ProgramDo you want to join a pickleball program but not sure if you are ready?  Do you know the basics of pickleball?  Join us for a new program that will let players who are just learning the sport get comfortable enough to join in a free play program.This 3 or 4-week session is to get the new players acquainted with how free play works and to work on basic skills with player who have very little experience. Participants must have taken Pickleball 101 or 102. (or similar experience) There is no formal instruction just instructional reminders on how to Serve, Volley, Double-Bounce Rule, Scoring, Player Position for Doubles and Doubles Play Positioning Movements.Advanced Practice Sessions (4-week session)Have you taken a lesson or clinic and then struggled to find an environment to practice what you learned? These classes will provide you with the environment to practice what you’ve learned and perfect your game.  During these practice sessions emphasis will be put on repetition and development of muscle memory retention using drills and drill games. Skills include serve, return of serve, third shot options, transitioning to the NVZ and dinking. This clinic is geared towards advanced beginner and intermediate players that are looking to take their game to the next.  Private Lessons Available 1 person $70 hour2 people $70 hour3 people $99 hourScheduled on request call the office and ask for Mary to book a lesson.  To book a lesson you must have an account.          (Please set up an account before making a schedule request)